OWNER’S MANUAL
2017
2017 FIAT
®
500 ABARTH
FIAT
®
500 ABARTH
AND ABARTH CABRIO
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
17FX24-126-AD
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ..................................69
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . .....................................109
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................185
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES .................................................249
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE ..................................................269
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................315
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . ..........................................321
10
INDEX .....................................................................327
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be
assured that it represents precision workmanship, dis-
tinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of
your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Informa-
tion, and various customer-oriented documents. Please
take the time to read these publications carefully. Fol-
lowing the instructions and recommendations in this
manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of
your vehicle.
The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services
that FCA US LLC offers to its customers:
• The Warranty with terms and conditions for main-
taining its validity
• The range of additional services available to FCA US
LLC customers
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient refer-
encing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your autho-
rized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-
trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
cares about your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which
section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
4 INTRODUCTION
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or through-
out this Owner’s Manual:
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAU-
TIONS against procedures that could result in damage
to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s
Manual, you may miss important information. Observe
all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on
the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears
engraved on the right front door sill, under the sill scuff
plate, on an adhesive label applied to the right door
opening on the B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and
title.
Vehicle Identification Number
Stamped VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS ............11
▫ Mechanical Ignition Key Removal .........11
▫ Locking Doors With A Key...............13
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ...............13
䡵 SENTRY KEY .........................13
▫ Replacement Keys ....................14
▫ General Information ...................14
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM .............14
▫ To Arm The System....................14
▫ To Disarm The System .................14
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY ...............15
▫ To Unlock The Doors, Liftgate, And Charge Port
Door ..............................15
▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st
Press..............................16
▫ Opening Power Top Remote Function ......16
▫ To Lock The Doors, Liftgate, And Charge Port
Door ..............................17
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs .........17
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement ............17
▫ General Information ...................19
䡵 DOOR LOCKS ........................19
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped .........20
▫ Auto Door Locks .....................21
䡵 POWER WINDOWS ....................21
▫ Power Window Switches ................21
▫ Auto-Down .........................22
▫ Wind Buffeting ......................22
䡵 LIFTGATE ...........................22
2
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .........23
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features .......23
▫ Important Safety Precautions .............23
▫ Seat Belt Systems .....................25
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).......34
▫ Child Restraints ......................47
▫ Transporting Pets .....................63
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .63
䡵 SAFETY TIPS .........................64
▫ Transporting Passengers.................64
▫ Exhaust Gas .........................64
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................65
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................67
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The key fob contains a mechanical integrated key. To
use the mechanical key, simply push the mechanical key
release button.
The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key
code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the autho-
rized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers
can be used to order duplicate keys.
Mechanical Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the gear selector in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
2. Rotate the key to the OFF/LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the mechanical ignition switch.
Key Fob
1 — Mechanical Key Release
Button
3 — Lock Button
2 — Unlock Button 4 — Liftgate Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK or the manual
transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply
the parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove
the key fobs from vehicle, and lock all doors. and
lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
Mechanical Ignition Switch Positions
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always re-
move the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn
the key to the right.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK
sounds a signal to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Opera-
tion is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is
locked or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the vehicle security light is on after the key is turned
to the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, it indicates that
there is a problem with the electronics.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not com-
patible with some aftermarket remote starting
systems. Use of these systems may result in
vehicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. When
having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement
of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition for unauthor-
ized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the
vehicle security alarm will provide the following au-
dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle
security light in the instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Push the key fob lock button.
To Disarm The System
Push the key fob unlock button or cycle the ignition to
the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
vehicle security alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has oc-
curred, the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in
the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held key fob. The key fob does not need to
be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To Unlock The Doors, Liftgate, And Charge Port
Door
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s door or twice, within five sec-
onds, to unlock all doors, liftgate, and charge port door.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also
turn on.
Key Fob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock
either the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of
the unlock button on the key fob. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Opening Power Top Remote Function
The remote keyless power top function can only be
used with the engine off.
NOTE: The remote keyless power top function can be
used to open the power top to the spoiler position.
Opening Power Top Remote Function:
OPEN — Push and hold the unlock button down on the
key fob for a minimum of three seconds to initiate
Power Top Open. The roof will stop opening whenever
the unlock button on the key fob is released, or when it
reaches the spoiler position.
NOTE: If your power convertible top does not open
with the remote, please refer to the ⬙Power Convertible
Top Relearn Procedure” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Failure to follow these warnings can result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you:
• Before operating the power top, make sure that no
moving parts of the convertible top can injure a
person or animal.
(Continued)
Key Fob Unlock/Power Top Open Button Location
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near
the convertible top components, the upper wind-
shield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or
the convertible top stowage area while raising or
lowering the convertible top.
• When using the power top button on key fob, if
potential danger exists while lowering the top,
release the button immediately to interrupt the
operation.
To Lock The Doors, Liftgate, And Charge Port
Door
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock
all doors, liftgate, and charge port door. The turn signal
lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge
the signal.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Refer to “Sentry Key” in this section for further infor-
mation.
If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. Push the mechanical key release button and release
the mechanical key to access the battery case screw
located on the side of the key fob.
Mechanical Key Release Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the key fob
using a small screwdriver.
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the
battery observing its polarity.
4. Reinstall the battery case inside the key fob and turn
the screw to lock it into place.
Key Fob Screw Location Battery Case Removed
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DOOR LOCKS
The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked
from inside the vehicle by using the door handle. If the
door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on
the door handle (indicating locked) when the door is
closed, the door will lock.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK or the manual
transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply
(Continued)
Driver’s Door Lock Handle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
WARNING! (Continued)
the parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove
the key fobs from vehicle, and lock all doors. and
lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always re-
move the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is incorporated into the
driver door handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or
unlock the doors and liftgate. If the driver’s door
handle is pushed, a red lock indicator will show on the
driver’s door handle (indicating locked). When the
door is closed, the door will lock.
NOTE: To prevent the key from being locked in the
vehicle, the doors will automatically unlock if the
driver’s door handle is pushed when the key is in the
ignition.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Door Locks
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor-
dance with local laws.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls located on the shifter
bezel, below the climate controls, which operate the
driver and passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
Power Door Lock Handle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not let children play with power windows. Do
not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
Auto-Down
The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch for approximately one
second, release, and the window will go down auto-
matically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate
the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof open-
ing to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or activate the
power door lock switches located on the driver door
handle.
To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Power Window Switches
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
NOTE: Gas props support the liftgate in the open
position. However, because the gas pressure drops with
temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props
when opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask
your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Liftgate Handle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in
this section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information) should be secured in
a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to
the “If You Need Consumer Assistance” section for
customer service contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibil-
ity of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle
should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert
feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
the AVV/START or MAR/ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the AVV/START or MAR/ON/RUN position, a
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled
when the ignition switch is first in the AVV/START or
MAR/ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passen-
ger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning se-
quence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light
and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will remain on until the seat belts are
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their
seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other
items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or
when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recom-
mended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your au-
thorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
(Continued)
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also provided at their
seating position to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions
to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly.
In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure
the seat belt is flat against your body, without
twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi-
ately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly caus-
ing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt
into the buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dan-
gerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces
of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and
neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can
cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will take
the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not pro-
tect you from injury during a collision. You are
more likely to hit your head in a collision if you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and
shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. In-
spect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded web-
bing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the
top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide
you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use the Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front
edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the
center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6
inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when
the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretension-
ing devices that are designed to remove slack from the
seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretension-
ers work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint
system. For additional information, refer to “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the
“Child Restraints” section of this manual.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Auto-
matic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is in-
stalled in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
gency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to re-
strain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or
children who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraints that have a har-
ness for restraining the child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask
your authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wir-
ing associated with the electrical Air Bag System Com-
ponents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the fol-
lowing Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec-
tronic parts of the air bag system whenever
the ignition switch is in the AVV/START or
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the igni-
tion switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the
air bags will not inflate.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight sec-
onds for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns
on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or
continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if
the light comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a mal-
function is detected that could affect the air bag system.
The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunc-
tion. While the air bag system is designed to be main-
tenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condi-
tion the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your
protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bag
system to protect you in a collision. If the light does
not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is
first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle,
or if it comes on as you drive, have your authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front air
bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems.
The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the
steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted
in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed
on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
(Continued)
Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel
or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system pro-
vides output appropriate to the severity and type of
collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC), which may receive information from the
front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects
whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is
buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air bag
cushions are designed to open only when the air
bags are inflating.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air
bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear,
side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for example,
some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air
bags.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts, preten-
sioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemen-
tal Side Air Bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at
a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the perfor-
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIR-
BAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
the headliner out of the way and covers the window.
The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occu-
pants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SABICs
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the deployment of the SABICs.
The trim covering above the side windows where
the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attachments (bolts
or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do
not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any
reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment
of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is
appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.
The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The system is
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact
side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air
Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys
the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air
bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING! (Continued)
children, should never lean on or sleep against
the door, side windows, or area where the side air
bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from
an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protec-
tion from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear
their seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be prop-
erly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely in-
jured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed be-
low:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air
bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to
friction rope burns or those you might get sliding
along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are not
permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few days,
or if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-
diately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s
instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
air bags will not be in place to protect you.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners can-
not protect you in another collision. Have the air
bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt
retractor assemblies replaced by your authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Re-
straint Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication net-
work remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will
determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident
Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard lights
can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a
message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the
ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Care-
fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine com-
partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right
turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may
both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to
move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must
follow the system reset procedure.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Action Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two
seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/
OFF/LOCK. (Turn Sig-
nal Must be placed in
Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
Customer Action Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two
seconds
8. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal
switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed
in Neutral State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/
OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire
sequence needs to be
completed within one
minute or sequence will
need to be repeated).
System is now reset and
the engine may be
started.
Turn hazard flashers
OFF (Manually).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60
seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the
reset procedure must be performed again in order to be
successful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body struc-
ture, or add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag
system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to your authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• These data can help provide a better understanding
of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries
occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired dur-
ing a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly re-
strained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Own-
er’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or
Age
Recommended Type of Child
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Con-
vertible Child Restraint, facing
rearward in the rear seat of the ve-
hicle
Small Children Children who are at least two
years old or who have out-grown
the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
with a five-point Harness, facing
forward in the rear seat of the ve-
hicle
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Size, Height, Weight or
Age
Recommended Type of Child
Restraint
Larger Children Children who have out-grown
their forward-facing child restraint,
but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and
the vehicle seat belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child
Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat
belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent
over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat
are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle,
do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjust-
ing the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle
seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child re-
straint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it
in the vehicle with a seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave
it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
accident, it could strike the occupants or seat-
backs and cause serious personal injury.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then
the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle.
If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat
belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is
latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on
the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under
an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may
result in serious injury or death. A child must
always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of
the seat belt correctly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint an-
chorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are used
to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In
these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with
the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint.
Please see the following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints
In This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to
the LATCH anchorages if allowed
by the booster seat manufacturer.
See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can two child restraints be at-
tached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchor-
ages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes Yes, all may be removed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of
the seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the
lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to
the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at
LATCH Anchorages
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way
to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor.
Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint
and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt
interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of
buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they
should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they
to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure
a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s direc-
tions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the web-
bing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic
Locking Mode” description in “Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint
Systems” for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
= Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a for-
ward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes Yes, all may be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure
a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s direc-
tions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need
to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward
and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move
it to its rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the web-
bing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of
approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no
top tether anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if
one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where pos-
sible, route the tether strap under the head restraint
and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the
head restraint and pass the tether strap around the
outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint
top tether strap.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and
possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic
braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet har-
nesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades,
refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level
with the engine oil indicator often during the break in
period. Add oil as required.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odor-
less. Breathing it can make you unconscious and
can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
(CO), follow these safety tips:
(Continued)
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all win-
dows are closed and the climate control BLOWER
switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the
recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine ex-
haust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the
vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect
the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment.
In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the
vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as
required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question
regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the
seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is
first placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. If
the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving, have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems” for further
information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should be
able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See
your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners
may cause your floor mat to interfere with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss
of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using
the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your
floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat
over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using
the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an
additional floor mat on top of an existing floor
mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be
properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a
floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific make, model,
and year of your vehicle.
(Continued)
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interference,
with the vehicle properly parked with the engine
off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and
the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interfer-
ence. If your floor mat interferes with the opera-
tion of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place
the floor mat in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
cause a loss of vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the
floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure
to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using the
floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for
cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and
bulges. Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pres-
sure.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the
instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if
gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering
fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected.
The cause should be located and corrected immediately.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED .72
▫ Lowering The Power Top................72
▫ Raising The Power Top .................73
▫ Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure ....74
▫ Wind Stop ..........................75
䡵 MIRRORS ...........................75
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ................75
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . .75
▫ Power Mirrors .......................76
▫ Folding Mirrors.......................77
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...........78
▫ Sun Visors ..........................78
䡵 SEATS ..............................78
▫ Forward/Rearward Adjustment ...........79
▫ Recline Adjustment ....................80
▫ Seat Height Adjustment .................80
▫ EZ Entry Feature......................80
▫ Memory Feature ......................81
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped .............81
▫ Front Non-Adjustable Head Restraints ......82
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD ........84
䡵 LIGHTS .............................85
▫ Multifunction Lever....................85
▫ Headlights ..........................86
▫ High Beams .........................86
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................86
▫ Parking Lights .......................86
▫ Daytime Running Lights ................86
3
▫ Turn Signals ........................87
▫ Lane Change Assist ...................87
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay.........87
▫ Interior Lights .......................88
▫ Cargo Area Lights .....................89
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............89
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .....89
▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation .........90
▫ Rear Windshield Wiper .................91
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . .92
䡵 SPEED CONTROL .....................92
▫ To Activate ..........................93
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................93
▫ To Deactivate ........................94
▫ To Resume Speed .....................94
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............94
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............95
䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ........96
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors ................96
▫ Rear Park Assist Warning Display..........96
▫ Rear Park Assist Display ................96
▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts ...........97
▫ Failure Indications.....................99
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System.......99
▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions ......100
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .......101
▫ To Open ...........................102
▫ To Close ...........................102
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ..................102
▫ Wind Buffeting ......................102
▫ Emergency Operation..................103
▫ Sun Shade — If Equipped ..............103
䡵 ELECTRICAL
POWER OUTLETS ..........103
䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED .........105
70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED
On vehicles equipped with a power convertible top, the
power convertible top switch is located on the overhead
console. The switch contains two buttons. The passen-
ger side button, is used to open the power top, and the
driver side button, is used to close the power top.
NOTE:
• The power top buttons will operate when the ignition
switch is turned to the ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The power top can be remotely operated with the key
fob. Refer to “Opening Power Top Remote Function”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
more information.
• The soft top cannot be lowered in temperatures lower
than –22°F (-30°C) but it can be closed at tempera-
tures as low as –4° F (-20°C).
• The highest temperature that the convertible top is
operational is at 176°F (80°C).
Lowering The Power Top
Auto Open
Push the top open button approximately one second for
the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top
open button for approximately one second a second
time to fully open the convertible top.
Manual Open
For manual open, push and hold the open button until
desired roof position or until spoiler position.
Power Convertible Top Switch
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Vertical movement only operates in auto open/close
mode.
• If you are traveling at speeds above 50 mph
(80 km/h) and wish to open the top, it will open to
only three-quarter of the way.
Raising The Power Top
Auto Close
From the convertible top fully open position, push the
top close button for approximately one second for the
three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top close
button for approximately one second a second time for
the one-quarter open position. Push and hold close
button to fully close convertible top.
Manual Close
For manual close, push and hold the close button until
desired position until one-quarter open position. Push
and hold again for full close position.
NOTE:
• If the top is three-quarter of the way open, you can
close the top if vehicle speeds are above 50 mph
(80 km/h).
• If the top is fully open and the vehicle is traveling at
50 mph (80 km/h) or above, it will not allow you to
close the top.
NOTE: Rail lubrication is recommended every 2000
cycles, or if scratching noises due to dust are present.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubes, and Genuine Part” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for information.
WARNING!
The convertible top does not provide the structural
protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the
fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection
of the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is
important that all occupants wear their seat belts at
all times. Death or serious injuries could occur if
you are ejected from the vehicle during a collision.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can dam-
age the top material. Also, increased water pres-
sure may force water past the weather strips.
• Remove any standing water from the top and dry
the surface before opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the
vehicle’s interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pres-
sure directed at the weather strip seals may cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure
If your power convertible top does not operate in the
Auto Opening/Closing mode (automatically opening/
closing to the one-quarter open and three-quarter open
comfort stops), or if the remote keyless power top
function is inoperable, or if the trunk lid does not open
- the following relearn procedure may be necessary.
1. Confirm that the door/trunk lid are closed.
2. Begin with the top in the fully closed position (using
manual mode).
3. Hold the open button to move the top to the fully
open position.
4. Continue to hold the open button for an additional
three seconds.
5. Release the open button.
6. Hold the closed button to move the top to the fully
closed position.
7. Continue to hold the closed button until the top
begins to cycle fully open, then release the closed
button.
At the end of step 7 the top will automatically cycle to
the fully open position, and then close to the 1/4 open
position.
This will confirm that the relearn procedure was suc-
cessful.
Auto open/close will now be functional, as well as
trunk lid operation, and remote keyless power top
function.
NOTE: DO NOT interrupt this activity.
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the power convertible top does not relearn, repeat the
procedure a second time.
Wind Stop
The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the
vehicle. The Wind Stop will not interfere with power
top operation. Therefore, it can remain installed when
the top is up.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be re-
duced by moving the small control under the mirror to
the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The
mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position
(toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on
or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror.
The on/off symbol on the button will illuminate when
the auto-dimming feature is enabled.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in REVERSE.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select
switch and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust
a mirror, push the mirror select switch to either the L
(left) or R (right) to select the mirror you need to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Power Mirror Switches
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger
side convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide
with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Spotter Mirror — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a driver’s side spotter
mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of
visibility on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal
and full rearward.
Spotter Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on
the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sun Visors
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visors can
be rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both
sun visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors. To view
the courtesy mirror, slide the mirror cover outward.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
(Continued)
Slide Courtesy Mirror Cover Outward (Passenger Side
Shown)
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss
of control which could cause a collision and
serious injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly ad-
justed seat belt.
Adjusting Bar
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
Recline Adjustment
The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard
side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the
recline lever, lean back until the desired position has
been reached, and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or
pump the lever downward to lower the seat height.
EZ Entry Feature
The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry
feature for rear seat passengers. Pull upward on the
release tether, located on the outboard side of the
seatback, dump the seatback forward, then slide the
seat forward to allow access in and out of the rear seat.
Recline Lever Height Adjuster
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to
its locked position once the rear passengers are seated.
Memory Feature
Both front seats have a memory feature, which can
operate in two ways:
Memory Function Option 1 — Full Seat Back
And Track Fore/Aft Position Memory:
After using the EZ entry function, the seatback angle
and the track fore/aft adjuster can both re-lock into the
position they were most recently adjusted to. This is
accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its
last fore/aft position on the tracks before the seat back
is returned upright.
Memory Function Option 2 — Seat Back Only
Memory:
After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may
first be returned upright prior to going back to the last
fore/aft (memory) position on the tracks. This results in
the seat back memory being set only – The track will
then be locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory
position. To then reset the fore/aft track memory fea-
ture (to reestablish Memory Function Option 1), the seat
has to be returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft
memory track position as described in Memory Func-
tion Option 1.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats
are located on the center instrument panel area.
Push the switch once to turn on the heated
seats. Push the switch a second time to shut
the heating elements off.
EZ Entry Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical condition must exer-
cise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cush-
ion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could
cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Front Non-Adjustable Head Restraints
The non-adjustable head restraints are form fitted into the
upper structure of the seatback and are designed to reduce
the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event
of a rear impact. The seatback should be properly adjusted
to an upright position where the head restraint is posi-
tioned as close as possible to the back of your head.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seatback could cause serious injury.
Non-Adjustable Head Restraint
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for information on tether routing.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever,
located on the left kick panel, rearward.
2. Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the
hood, near the center, and raise the hood.
3. Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left
side when standing in front of the hood) of the
engine compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the
hole of hood hinge to secure the hood in the open
position.
Hood Release Lever
Hood Safety Latch Location
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the
prop rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and block
your vision. Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood
to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood
is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle
unless hood is fully closed, with both latches en-
gaged.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
headlight beam selection, passing light and turn sig-
nals.
NOTE: The headlights can only be turned on with the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Hood Prop Rod
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
Headlights
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever
upward to the first detent for headlight op-
eration.
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
High Beams
With the low beams activated, push the multi-
function lever towards the instrument panel to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will turn on the high beams until the
lever is released.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key
or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position
and turn on the headlights.
Daytime Running Lights
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.
NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be
on with DRL.
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle
was purchased the DRL function can be turned on or off
using the display menus. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Headlight Operation
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right
turn or downward to signal a left turn. The correspond-
ing indicator in the instrument cluster display will blink
to indicate the operation of the turn signal.
NOTE: The indicators will automatically turn off when
the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is
returned to a straight position.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will
automatically turn off.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for a preset period of
time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction lever
toward the steering wheel within two minutes. Each
time the lever is pulled, the activation of the lights will
be extended by 30 seconds. The activation of the lights
can be extended to a maximum of 210 seconds.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel
and hold it for more than two seconds.
Turn Signal Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
Interior Lights
The interior light switches are located in the overhead
console. The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right
Position).
Using the switch on the left overhead, push the switch
to the right from its center position and the lights are
always on. Push the switch to the left from its center
position and the lights are always off. Leave the switch
in the center position, and the lights are turned on and
off when the doors are opened or closed. The switch on
the right side of the overhead console controls the map
or reading function of the lights. Push the switch to the
right to turn on the right light and push the switch to
the left to turn on the left light.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
switch is in the center position or that the lights are
off to avoid draining the battery.
Interior Light Timing (Center Position)
There are four different modes of operation that can be
activated in this position:
• When one door is opened, a three minute timer is
activated.
• When the key is removed from the ignition (within
two minutes of the ignition being turned OFF), a 10
second timer is activated.
• When the doors are unlocked with the key fob, a 10
second timer is activated.
• When the doors are locked with the key fob, the
lights will turn off.
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)
• When all doors are closed a 15-minute timer is
activated.
NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the ON/RUN position.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Area Lights
There is also a courtesy light located in the rear cargo
area. Whenever the rear lift gate is opened, the light will
turn on and then turn off when the lift gate is closed.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the
instrument panel, just below the radio.
Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights on.
Push the switch a second time to turn the front fog
lights off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only op-
erate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Cargo Light Location
Fog Light Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
raised or lowered to access these modes:
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers
will operate intermittently.
NOTE: The Intermittent function only has one detent,
but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle
speed. As vehicle speed increases, the delay time will
decrease.
Low Speed
Push the lever downward to the second detent. The
wipers will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Push the lever downward to the third detent. The
wipers will operate at high speed.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue
until the lever is released. When the lever is released,
the wipers will return to the off position and automati-
cally shut off.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will
Windshield Wiper Operation
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is
released.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park posi-
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-
vents the windshield wiper blades from returning
to the off position. If the windshield wiper con-
trol is turned off and the blades cannot return to
the off position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.
Rear Windshield Wiper
Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever
upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings
for intermittent wipe operation. With the front wind-
shield wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield
wiper/washer lever upward. The rear wiper will oper-
ate in the same mode as the front windshield wipers,
but at half the frequency. When the transmission is
shifted into REVERSE, the rear wiper will automatically
operate at low speed and return to normal operation
when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only op-
erate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Rear Wiper Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
instrument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and
hold the lever for more than a half second and the
wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after
the lever is released.
TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located
on the left-side of the steering column, below the turn
signal controls.
Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one
hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to
lock the column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelera-
tor operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
Tilt Control Lever
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control system has been designed to shut down if
multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the
same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control system can
be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF
button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The cruise control indicator
light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate.
To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. The cruise control indicator light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in
use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (-)
button.
Speed Control Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Speed Control without erasing
the set speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button or
turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed in
memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed
by pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect settings if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown is de-
pendent on the selected speed unit of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed
by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect settings if equipped. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Set-
tings” in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
more information. The speed decrement shown is de-
pendant on the selected speed unit of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain
the vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle
could go too fast for the conditions, and you could
lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are wind-
ing, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist system provides visual and au-
dible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing
up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park
Assist System Usage Precautions” for the limitations of
this system and recommendations.
The Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when
the transmission is placed into REVERSE.
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that
is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can
detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from ap-
proximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 55 inches (140 cm)
from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24
inches (60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/
bumper, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corre-
sponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that
would clear the underside of the vehicle during the
parking maneuver.
Rear Park Assist Warning Display
The Rear Park Assist Warning screen is located within
the Uconnect Settings. It provides audible and visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel⬙ for further information.
Rear Park Assist Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
arcs in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show solid arcs in the center rear region
and will produce an audible alert. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show fewer arcs
and the audible alert becomes more frequent.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show solid arcs in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce an audible
alert. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show fewer arcs and the audible alert
becomes more frequent.
Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmis-
sion is placed into REVERSE, an audible alert is acti-
vated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the
distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick
succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle.
A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than
12 inches (30 cm) away.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present within the
sensors’ field of view
Audible Signal (dashboard loud-
speaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate
that increases as the distance de-
creases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12
inches (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level. (Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information).
Visual Signal (Instrument Cluster
Display)
• Arcs are shown based on the ob-
stacle’s distance and location rela-
tive to the vehicle. (Refer to “Rear
Park Assist Display” for further
information).
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal (Instrument Panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message appears on the instru-
ment cluster display (where pro-
vided).
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is
not muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the
distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if
the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant.
If this condition occurs for the external sensors, the
signal is turned off after three seconds (stopping warn-
ings during maneuvers parallel to walls).
Failure Indications
A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system
is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the
instrument panel warning icon and message appearing
on the instrument cluster display.
The warning icon is illuminated and a mes-
sage appearing on the instrument cluster dis-
play. Refer to ⬙Instrument Cluster Display⬙ in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are
indicated immediately if they occur when the system is
ON.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific
sensor is in failure condition, the instrument cluster
display shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is
unavailable, without reference to the sensor in failure
condition. If even a single sensor fails, the entire system
must be disabled. The system is turned off automati-
cally.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths.
In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the
vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4
inches (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke
the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Park Assist System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of
the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,
dirt or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist
system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so
can result in the system misinterpreting a close object
as a sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, ani-
mals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. You are responsible for safety
and must continue to pay attention to your sur-
roundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
• Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the
vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will
be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the warning display turns on the single
flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be tempo-
rarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not be
detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using Rear Park Assist.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located in the overhead
console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location acces-
sible to children. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts,
or any object to project through the sunroof
opening. Injury may result.
To Open
Push and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for
approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at
the vented position. Push the switch a second time and
hold for approximately one second and release, the
sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open opera-
tion, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
To Close
With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the
power sunroof button and hold it for approximately
one second, the sunroof will return to the vented
position. Pull the switch a second time and hold for
approximately one second to completely close the sun-
roof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Operation
In case of electrical failure, the sunroof can be operated
with the hex wrench that is located in the glove
compartment. There is a plug located in the rear of the
sunroof opening at the center of the vehicle. Removing
the plug reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of
the sunroof. Insert the hex wrench and turn, moving the
sunroof to the desired location.
Sun Shade — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a
fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or
closed. To open the sun shade, push the tab and move
the shade to a full open position.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet,
located in the floor console, for added convenience. This
power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and
other low power devices.
Manual Sun Shade
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON/
RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or accessory
plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the heating element,
do not hold the lighter in the heating position.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps)
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow
the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Power Outlet
Power Outlet Fuse Location – Underhood
F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console/Aux Power
Outlet
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with great caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED
This is located on the center console, in front of the cup
holders. To activate the cigar lighter, push and release
the knob. After a few seconds the knob automatically
returns to its initial position, and the cigar lighter is
ready for use.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.
To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter
with care. Always check that the cigar lighter has
turned off.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
CUPHOLDERS
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are
located on the floor console between the front seats.
For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the
floor between the front driver and passenger seats.
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow
increased cargo capacity.
Push down the release button, located at the outboard
top of the seatback and move the seatback to its
folded-down position to provide a flat load floor cargo
area. When returning the seatback to its upright posi-
tion, push rearward until the seatback is properly
latched.
Glove Compartment Latch Rear Seat Release Buttons
Folded Rear Seats
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located in
the center of the instrument panel, below the
radio. Push this button to turn on the rear window
defroster. An indicator in the instrument cluster display
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut the de-
froster off, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping paral-
lel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES .........111
䡵 TURBO BOOST GAUGE .................112
䡵 SPORT INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS .........113
䡵 SPORT TURBO INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS . . .117
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ................121
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS ......123
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights .............124
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ...........131
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ...........140
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights ............142
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights ...........142
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........143
▫ Instrument Cluster Display And Controls . . .143
▫ Display Menu Set-Up..................145
▫ Oil Change Message Reset ..............146
▫ Trip Computer ......................147
▫ Trip Button .........................147
▫ Tire Pressure ........................148
▫ Trip Functions ......................148
▫ Values Displayed .....................148
▫ Submenu Personal Settings .............149
䡵 CYBERSECURITY......................154
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS ..................155
䡵 IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED ..........................156
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS .................156
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate...............156
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen.............157
4
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0/5.0 NAV Settings .................157
䡵 UCONNECT 5.0/5.0 NAV VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS .........................165
▫ Introducing Uconnect..................165
▫ Get Started .........................166
▫ Basic Voice Commands ................166
▫ Radio .............................167
▫ Media.............................168
▫ Voice Text Reply .....................168
▫ Radio Operation And Mobile Phones.......169
▫ Harmful Interference Statement...........169
▫ Additional Information ................169
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .....170
▫ Radio Operation .....................170
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .170
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ..................171
▫ Manual Climate Control Overview ........171
▫ Automatic Temperature Control Overview . . .175
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ..........................180
▫ Operating Tips ......................181
110 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Side Vent 7 — Passenger Air Bag 13 — Storage Compartment
2 — Multifunction Lever – Light Control 8 — Glove Compartment 14 — Gear Selector
3 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Rear Defrost Button 15 — Sport Button
4 — Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Com-
puter
10 — Hazard Button 16 — Horn/Driver Air Bag
5 — Central Air Vents 11 — Climate Controls 17 — Boost Gauge
6 — Radio 12 — Power Windows Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
TURBO BOOST GAUGE
Your vehicle is equipped with a boost gauge and
integrated shift light indicator located to the left of the
instrument cluster. The boost gauge indicates the intake
manifold pressure relative to barometric pressure. The
engine management system in your vehicle intelligently
regulates intake manifold pressure based on environ-
mental (ambient) and engine operating conditions.
Turbo Boost Gauge
1 — Turbo Boost Gauge
2 — SPORT Indicator
112 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SPORT INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS
Sport Instrument Cluster Base
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
1. Tachometer
• This gauge measures engine revolutions per min-
ute (RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red
area, ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine
damage.
2. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is operat-
ing satisfactorily.
Sport Instrument Cluster Sport Mode
114 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The digital gauge will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, or up
mountain grades. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for ser-
vice.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide
to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining
Your Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the Cool-
ing System Pressure Cap paragraph.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The digital display shows the amount of fuel in the
tank.
• The switching on of the digital warning light
indicates that 1 – 1.3 gallons of fuel are left in the
tank; in this situation, refuel as soon as possible.
• Do not travel with the fuel tank almost empty; any
gaps in fuel delivery could damage the catalytic
converter.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
5. Sport Base and Sport Mode Gauge Displays
Depending on what options and trim level, your vehicle
may be equipped with two gauge displays available
with the push of the Sport Mode button.
• “Sport Base” — Instant Consumption Bargraph:
This bargraph shows the instant fuel consumption,
the style changes according to vehicle version while
minimum and maximum values change depending
on selected unit. The possible labels are:
• mpg
• Km/l
• l/100 km
• “Sport Mode” — Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge: This
gauge shows what percent the gas pedal is cur-
rently depressed at.
• “Sport Mode” — The active Instrument Cluster
Display will change to the G-Force screen.
NOTE: Different trips may have different values even if
the same driving style is maintained. Some factors that
may impact the calculated index value are:
• Traffic conditions
• Trip duration
• Temperature (engine and ambient)
6. Instrument Cluster Display
• The Instrument Cluster Display features a driver-
interactive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
116 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SPORT TURBO INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS
Sport Turbo Instrument Cluster Base
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
1. Tachometer
• This gauge measures engine revolutions per min-
ute (RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red
area, ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine
damage.
2. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is operat-
ing satisfactorily.
Sport Turbo Instrument Cluster Sport Mode
118 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The digital gauge will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, or up
mountain grades. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide
to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining
Your Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the Cool-
ing System Pressure Cap paragraph.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The digital display shows the amount of fuel in the
tank.
• The switching on of the digital warning light
indicates that 1 – 1.3 gallons of fuel are left in the
tank; in this situation, refuel as soon as possible.
• Do not travel with the fuel tank almost empty; any
gaps in fuel delivery could damage the catalytic
converter.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
5. Sport Turbo Mode
Depending on what options and trim level, your vehicle
may be equipped with two gauge displays available
with the push of the Sport Mode button.
• “Sport Turbo Base” — Instant Consumption Bar
Graph: This bar graph shows the instant fuel con-
sumption, the style changes according to vehicle
version while minimum and maximum values
change depending on selected unit. The possible
labels are:
• mpg
• Km/l
• l/100 km
• “Turbo Sport Mode” — Turbo Boost Gauge: This
gauge shows what pressure the turbo boost is
currently at.
NOTE: Different trips may have different values even if
the same driving style is maintained. Some factors that
may impact the calculated index value are:
• Traffic conditions
• Trip duration
6. Instrument Cluster Display
• The Instrument Cluster Display features a driver-
interactive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
• “Turbo Sport Mode” — The active Instrument
Cluster Display will change to the G-Force screen.
• Temperature (engine and ambient)
120 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
• This gauge measures engine revolutions per min-
ute (RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red
area, ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine
damage.
2. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is operat-
ing satisfactorily.
Instrument Cluster
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
•
The digital gauge will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for ser-
vice.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide
to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining
Your Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the Cool-
ing System Pressure Cap paragraph.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The digital display shows the amount of fuel in the
tank.
• The switching on of the digital warning light
indicates that 1 – 1.3 gallons of fuel are left in the
tank; in this situation, refuel as soon as possible.
• Do not travel with the fuel tank almost empty; any
gaps in fuel delivery could damage the catalytic
converter.
5. Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge/Turbo Gauge
Depending on what options and trim level, your vehicle
is equipped with there are three gauges available.
• Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge: This gauge shows
what percent the gas pedal is currently depressed
at.
• Turbo Gauge: This gauge shows the current turbo
usage.
122 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Different trips may have different values even if
the same driving style is maintained. Some factors that
may impact the calculated index value are:
• Traffic conditions
• Trip duration
• Temperature (engine and ambient)
6. Instrument Cluster Display
• The Instrument Cluster Display features a driver-
interactive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always
refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed
in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on,
or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on inter-
mittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle imme-
diately.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or
remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
124 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering). Re-
fer to “Electric Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake appli-
cation. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the
brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is
at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic sys-
tem malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light
will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake
Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD).
CAUTION!
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by placing the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position. The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the
parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If
the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by
an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the MAR (ACC/
ON/RUN) position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake applica-
tion.
126 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-
pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-
able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-
hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tem-
perature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for ser-
vice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further infor-
mation.
128 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
• Driver’s Door Open
• Passenger Door Open
• Driver and Passenger Door Open
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a message in the instrument cluster display and a
buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the message re-
mains after restarting the engine.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tem-
perature Warning Light illuminated will eventually
cause severe transmission damage or transmission
failure.
Hood Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires
as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair imme-
diately using the dedicated tire repair kit and con-
tact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of re-
placement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al-
ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-
ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
erly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. It should go out with
the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was manually turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds and flash the ESC activation light
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. For further information, refer
to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in “Starting And Operating.”
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position before en-
gine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from STOP (OFF/LOCK) to
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN), have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-
eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in nor-
mal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if
you drive slowly or park over flammable sub-
stances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.
This could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy
and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe
catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon
occur. Immediate service is required.
Rear Defrost Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Rear Defrost Light
This indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window de-
froster automatically turns off after 20 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping paral-
lel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indi-
cate function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and
stays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has be-
come inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized
dealer immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for fur-
ther information.
136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Generic Warning Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Generic Warning Indicator Light
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur: Oil
Change Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off
Not Available, Parking Sensor Failure, DST System Failure.
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light
This light will illuminate during an icy road condition.
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when there is a malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the vehicle security alarm system has detected an at-
tempt was made to break into the vehicle.
Stop Light Failure Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Stop Light Failure Indicator Light
This light will illuminate if one or more of the stop light bulb fails.
The failure relating to this light could be:
• One or more blown bulbs
• A blown protection fuse
• A break in the electrical connection
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Fuel Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.3 gallons (5 Liters) this light will turn on, and
remain on until fuel is added.
Glow Plug Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Glow Plug Light — If Equipped
This vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F
(–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not
been used. The Glow Plug light will flash during in cold weather for up to 10 seconds.
If equipped with a block heater harness the message ⬙Plug In Engine Heater⬙, will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5°F (-15° C) at the
time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
start.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal as se-
lected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-
function lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is on, but not set.
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information to the
driver. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display for
viewing, and display the total miles (kilometers) in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed
to display important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive display
located on the instrument panel, your instrument clus-
ter display can show you how systems are working and
give you warnings when they aren’t. The steering wheel
mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter
the main menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make selections and
adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display And Controls
The driver-interactive instrument cluster display is lo-
cated in the center of the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
The system display consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Push and release the MENU button briefly to access the
instrument cluster display. Push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to return to the
main screen.
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward
through the displayed menu and the related options or
to increase the displayed value.
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the displayed menu and the related
options or to decrease the value displayed.
NOTE: Up and down arrow buttons activate different
functions according to the following situations:
• To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards.
• To increase or decrease values during settings.
NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the
instrument cluster display will turn on the clock and the
miles or kilometers covered (if equipped) for a few
seconds.
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Menu Set-Up
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. Push and release the up and down arrow buttons
to access the different options and settings (setup).
The setup menu can be activated by pushing the MENU
button. A single push on the up or down arrow button
will scroll through the setup menu options. The menu
includes the following functions:
• Buzzer Volume
• Service (Only If Equipped)
• Headlight Adjustment (Only If Equipped)
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Screen
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Screen Continued
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
• Trip B Data
• Audio Repetition — If Equipped
• Navigation Repetition — If Equipped
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without
Submenu
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select
the main menu option to set.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button (by
single pushes) to select the new setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store
the new setting and go back to the main menu option
previously selected.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Sub-
menu
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display
the first submenu option.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button (by
single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu
options.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select
the displayed submenu option and to open the
relevant setup menu.
4. Push and release the up or down arrow button (by
single pushes) to select the new setting for this
submenu option.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store
the new setting and go back to the previously
selected submenu option.
6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to the
main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer
hold).
Oil Change Message Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display for ap-
proximately 5 seconds after a single chime has sounded
to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The
engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may fluc-
tuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RUN) position. To turn off the message temporarily,
push and release the MENU button. To reset the oil
change indicator system (after performing the sched-
uled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
1. Place the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position. (do not start the engine.)
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Computer
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster.
It features a driver-interactive display (displays infor-
mation such as trip information, range, fuel consump-
tion, average speed, and travel time).
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
described values.
• A short button push displays the different values.
• A long button push resets the system and then starts
a new trip.
New Trip
To reset:
• Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system
manually.
• When the “Trip distance” reaches 99999.9 kilometers
(621370 miles) or when the “Travel time” reaches
99.59 (99 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset
automatically.
• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the
system.
NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of
the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the
information associated with Trip A or Trip B functions
will be reset.
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for
over two seconds to reset trip information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have
been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer
than one second.
Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to
the menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing settings.
Tire Pressure
This function will be used to display the tire pressures
individually for all four tires by location.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new
trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip Distance A
• Average Fuel Economy A
• Average Speed A
• Travel Time A (Driving Time)
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip Distance B
• Average Fuel Economy B
• Average Speed B
• Travel Time B (Driving Time)
“Current Trip” can be used to display the figures
relating to:
• Range
• Instantaneous Fuel Consumption
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip
B Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous Fuel Consump-
tion” cannot be reset.
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving
conditions will not change. The message “----” will
appear on the display in the following cases:
• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain
roads, etc.), and conditions of use of the vehicle (load,
tire pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into account
the above notes.
Distance Traveled
This value shows the distance covered since the last
reset.
Average Fuel Economy
This value shows the approximate average fuel con-
sumption since the last reset.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-
stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the
display if the vehicle is parked with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a
function of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
Submenu Personal Settings
Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning)
With this function the volume of the buzzer accompa-
nying any failure/warning indication can be adjusted
to Low, Medium, High.
Buzzer Volume Submenu Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the up or down arrow button, then highlight
the Buzzer Volume. Push and release the MENU
button to enter the Buzzer Volume MENU.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings.
Buzzer Volume Submenu Settings:
• Off
• Low
• Medium
• High
• Return to MENU
Service – If Equipped
This function allows you to display the information
about mileage intervals for servicing your car.
To view this information, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to enter
the Main MENU.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to
select Service. Push and release the MENU button,
push and release the up or down arrow button to
reset.
Service Submenu Display
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The “Scheduled Servicing Plan” includes car
maintenance at fixed intervals.
This is displayed automatically, with ignition is in the
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, before servicing or,
where provided, 30 days before servicing.
Headlight Adjustment – If Equipped
When this function is activated the cluster will display
the headlight adjustment features.
To set the desired headlight setting, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the up or down arrow button to highlight
Headlight Adjustment. Push and release the MENU
button to enter the Headlight Adjustment MENU.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to
select the desired setting (0 – 3.)”
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen.
Headlight Adjustment Submenu Settings:
• 2
• 3
• 0
• 1
• Return to MENU
Headlight Adjustment Submenu Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Trip B Data (Trip B On)
Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or
deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display.
For further information, see “Trip Computer.”
For activation / deactivation, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to
select Trip B data. Push and release the up or down
arrow button to turn ON or OFF.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings.
Trip B Data Submenu Settings:
• On
• Off
• Return to MENU
Audio Repetition — If Equipped
Repeat Audio Information
Trip B Submenu Display
Audio Repetition Submenu Display
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
With this function active, the instrument cluster display
shows information relevant to the sound system.
• Radio: tuned radio station frequency, automatic tun-
ing activation or AutoStore.
• CD audio, CD MP3: track number.
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the sound system
info displaying, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the up or down arrow button to highlight See
Radio and push and release the MENU button.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings.
If the radio has Uconnect, refer to the appropriate
“Uconnect Radio Supplement” for further information.
Audio Repetition Submenu Settings:
• Off
• On
• Return to MENU
Navigation Repetition — If Equipped
With this function active, the instrument cluster display
shows information relevant to the navigation system.
• The turn by turn indication
• The distance to next maneuver
Navigation Repetition Submenu Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
• The name of the street (1 or 2 lines)
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the navigation
system info displaying, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the up or down button to highlight Naviga-
tion Repetition and push and release the MENU
button.
2. Push and release the up or down button for setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go
back to the menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU button (approximately one second) to go
back to the main screen without storing the settings.
• Off
• On
• Return to MENU
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks.
These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive
information. This information allows systems and fea-
tures in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlaw-
ful access to vehicle systems and wireless communica-
tions. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve
over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Simi-
lar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability and
performance of your systems or to reduce the potential
risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of
vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
(Continued)
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD)
into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source.
Media of unknown origin could possibly contain
malicious software, and if installed in your ve-
hicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest autho-
rized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regard-
ing software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and mini-
mize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle
owners should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/
software-update to learn about available Uconnect
software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully inter-
cept information and private communications without
your consent. For further information, refer to “On-
board Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB or AUX port, located in the center
console.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable fea-
tures. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
USB/AUX Port
1 — Auxiliary Cable Jack
2 — USB Connector
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen
And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90),
push the center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Display Off and
back arrow buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out
of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect touchscreen.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0/5.0 NAV Settings
Push the Settings
button on the faceplate, to dis-
play the settings menu screen. In this mode the
Uconnect system allows you to access programmable
feature settings.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the
desired mode, press and release the preferred setting
and make your selection. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen
or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the
previous menu or press the “X” button on the touch-
screen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the “AVV/ACC” position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
NOTE: When the “Display Mode” feature is set to “Auto” the radio touchscreen’s brightness will be adjusted
with all other Instrument Panel displays and lights when they are adjusted using the instrument cluster display
buttons on the right-hand side of the instrument cluster display. When the “Display Mode” feature is set to
“Manual” the radio screen brightness can be adjusted independently using the “Brightness” feature below.
Brightness +–
Language English Español Français
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen,
you may select each unit of measure independently
displayed in the instrument cluster display. The follow-
ing selectable units of measure are listed below:
Setting Name Selectable Options
US Changes the instrument cluster display to US units of measure.
Metric Changes the instrument cluster display to Metric units of measure.
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
After pressing “Custom” on the touchscreen, you may
select from one of the below menu items:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Fuel Consumption MPG (US) MPG (UK) L/100 km km/L
Temperature °C °F
Pressure psi kPa
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Long
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time and Format 12 hour 24 hour
NOTE: Press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Setting Name Selectable Options
Show Time Status On Off
Set Date Set Date
NOTE: Press the corresponding arrows above and below the current date to adjust.
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
NOTE: When in the “Sync Time” display, you may sync the time with GPS.
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Hill Start Assist On Off
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Daytime Running Lights On Off
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the
touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE: When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle
reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock Driver All
NOTE: When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock
button, you must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is se-
lected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Radio Off Delay 0 min. 20 min.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer +–
NOTE:
•
When in the “Equalizer” display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
•
Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade When in the “Balance/ Fade” display, you may adjust the Balance settings.
Auto-On Radio On Off Recall Last
NOTE: When the “Auto-On Radio” feature is selected, the radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run
or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
Radio Off With Door On Off
NOTE: When the “Radio Off With Door” feature is selected, the radio will remain on until the driver or pas-
senger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay time expires.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE: The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For fur-
ther information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE: “Tune Start” begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel us-
ing one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset
is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on,
except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to
or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Setting Name Selectable Options
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
•
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information
on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
•
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed
on the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes No
NOTE: When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Set-
tings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” Once the settings are re-
stored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to default⬙.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” but-
ton on the touchscreen, the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To
remove personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you
sure you want to clear all personal data?” Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal
data cleared”.
UCONNECT 5.0/5.0 NAV VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect
system.
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device
and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or PHONE button, wait until
after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR or PHONE button and
saying a Voice Command from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
VR And Phone Buttons
1 — Push to MUTE
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
3 — Push To End Call
4 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to
hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio
trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say Help. The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV VR
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and
Auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits;
Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to
see all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your
Voice Command must match exactly how the artist,
album, song and genre information is displayed.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
the PHONE button
and say Listen. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect sys-
tem.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the PHONE button
. After the beep, say... “Re-
ply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow
the system prompts.
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV Media
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are
you?
I will be <num-
ber> minutes
late.
Call me. Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need direc-
tions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implemen-
tation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take
advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later sup-
ports reading incoming text messages only.
Radio Operation And Mobile Phones
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna.
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo-
sitioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the
radio volume be turned down or off during mobile
phone operation.
Harmful Interference Statement
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400 (24
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the
wheel to access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to
select/enter an item while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are
in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio preset button.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of
Steering Wheel)
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo-
sitioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the
radio volume be turned down or off during mobile
phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Control Overview
Manual Climate Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when
the A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Setting
When this setting is on, the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Re-
circulation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high hu-
midity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog
on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air posi-
tion for maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment.
Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indi-
cates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer
temperatures.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon Description
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the
control clockwise from the OFF position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
Modes Control: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to change the airflow distribution mode. The air-
flow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard out-
lets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a
shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This set-
ting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Front Defrost
Mode
Front Defrost Mode
Turn the knob clockwise to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. Air comes
from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected,
the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for
best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping paral-
lel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control Overview
Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Automatic Temperature Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
Icon Description
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside
air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust,
or high humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog
on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air posi-
tion for maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode
and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Push and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illu-
minates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If
the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon Description
Blower Control Up And Down Buttons
Provides the passengers with blower control. Push the UP button to increase blower speed.
Push the DOWN button to decrease blower speed.
Modes Control: Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard out-
lets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a
shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. To access this mode, press
both the Panel and Floor Mode buttons
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of
the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This set-
ting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control Off Button
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control on/off.
Temperature Up And Down Button
Provides the passengers with temperature control. Push the Up button on the faceplate for
warmer temperature settings. Push the Down button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
ture settings.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping paral-
lel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also,
make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation
of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high hu-
midity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to
recirculate interior air by pushing the Recirculation
control button. The recirculation indicator will illumi-
nate when this button is selected. Push the button a
second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and
allow outside air into the vehicle.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with
Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically
if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation
while in this mode will cause the LED in the control
button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it
is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically
adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/Metric customer-
programmable feature.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Auto-
matic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will
remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower
will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual over-
ride features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC
display will be turned off when the system is being
used in the manual mode.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DE-
FROST mode must be manually selected to clear the
windshield and side glass.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheat-
ing. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recom-
mended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selec-
tion.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is func-
tioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
concentration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water
drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact your authorized dealer to service
your A/C air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ...............188
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped ......188
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . .188
▫ Normal Starting......................188
▫ Cold Weather Operation ...............188
▫ Extended Park Starting.................189
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ................189
▫ After Starting .......................190
▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” .............190
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED .190
▫ Five-Speed Manual Transmission .........190
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds .............191
▫ Downshifting .......................192
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED ..........................192
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock..............193
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . .193
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission ........194
▫ Gear Ranges ........................195
䡵 AUTOSTICK .........................199
▫ Operation ..........................199
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES ........200
▫ Acceleration ........................200
▫ Traction ...........................200
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER ............201
▫ Flowing/Rising Water .................201
▫ Shallow Standing Water ................201
5
䡵 POWER STEERING ....................202
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .....................203
䡵 SPORT MODE ........................205
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped.......205
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped.....205
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ......................206
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . .206
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . .206
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ..............208
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ...........208
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) ................209
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .........209
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light ...............212
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION ............213
▫ Tire Markings .......................213
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)..........216
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions .........217
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ..........218
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION .......223
▫ Tire Pressure .......................223
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ................224
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . .225
▫ Radial Ply Tires .....................225
▫ Tire Types..........................226
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped ............227
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ..............227
▫ Tire Spinning .......................230
▫ T
read Wear Indicators .................230
▫ Life Of Tire ........................231
▫ Replacement Tires ....................232
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) ......233
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .233
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .......234
▫ Treadwear..........................234
▫ Traction Grades ......................234
▫ Temperature Grades...................234
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) .............................235
▫ TPM System With Comfort Cluster ........237
▫ TPM System With (TFT) Tire Pressure Display
Screen ............................239
▫ General Information ..................241
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS .................242
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ................242
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .............242
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ......243
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . .243
▫ MMT In Gasoline ....................243
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ...............244
▫ Fuel System Cautions..................244
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............245
䡵 ADDING FUEL .......................245
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ..............245
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ...........246
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ....................246
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ..................247
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle .247
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-
tor.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting
the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch
interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the
clutch pedal is pressed to the floor.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Press the brake
pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START)
position and release it when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Cold Weather Operation
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at
low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine crank-
ing when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
(–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indi-
cates an engine block heater has not been used. An
externally-powered electric engine block heater is avail-
able as optional equipment from your authorized dealer
or may be standard equipment in some markets.
The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed
in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature
is below 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is shut off
as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next
cold start.
CAUTION!
Use of the recommended SAE 5W-40 synthetic
engine oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change
intervals is important to prevent engine damage
and ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the ve-
hicle has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release
it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to 15 seconds,
cycle the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position,
wait five seconds to allow the starter to cool, then
repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
and damage the converter and vehicle.
• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continu-
ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds
at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying
again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
Turbocharger “Cool Down”
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool
the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the
pump will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has
been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbo-
charger. Although the pump is rubber-mounted for
quiet operation, it is normal to hear it running during
this time.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Five-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle, especially on an incline.
Gear Selector
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelera-
tor pedal.
Use each gear in numerical order; do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transmission is in first gear, not third, when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in third gear.
For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, fifth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnor-
mal wear on the clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission
lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher
shift efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the
transmission.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the follow-
ing table.
Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds
Units In mph (km/h)
Engine
Size
Accel-
era-
tion
Rate
1to
2
2to3 3to4 4to5
1.4L
Turbo
Accel 14
(23)
23
(37)
29
(47)
38
(61)
Cruise 12
(19)
18
(29)
25
(40)
32
(52)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may
cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is
selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to
the clutch and the transmission can result from
skipping a gear while downshifting or downshift-
ing at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch
pedal is held pressed (i.e., not released).
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to second or first gear when descending a steep
grade.
When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur-
dened.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine
is running. Before exiting a vehicle always apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the
ignition key. Once the key is removed, the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the fol-
lowing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF
(key removal) position. The key can only be removed
from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF
position, and once removed, the transmission is locked
in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission
Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmis-
sion gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are ap-
plied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the igni-
tion must be turned to the ON/RUN mode (engine
running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear
range. You must press the brake pedal to move the gear
selector out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission
Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move
the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the
DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a
few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/–) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the AutoStick position (beside the
Gear Selector
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right
(into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is
in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the park-
ing brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the ignition key.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine
is running. Before exiting a vehicle always apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the
ignition key. Once the key is removed, the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on
the gear selector and firmly move the gear selector all
the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selec-
tor will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift
into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traf-
fic or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do
In Emergencies” for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading con-
ditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to
AutoStick in this section for further information) to
select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear will improve performance and extend trans-
mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller will expand the
range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is
done to prevent transmission damage due to overheat-
ing.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine coolant temperature.
Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera-
ture has risen to a suitable level.
Instrument Cluster Messages
Dedicated messages will be displayed in the instrument
cluster to alert the driver when certain unusual condi-
tions occur.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission remains in third gear regardless of which
forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEU-
TRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home
Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized
dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to nor-
mal operation.
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we rec-
ommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer
has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem
could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driv-
ing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position
(beside the Drive position), it can be moved forward
and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select
the transmission gear being used. Moving the gear
selector forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward
(+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the gear
selector rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described
below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when
necessary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to
first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the
driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission
as the vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out (from a stop) in first, second, or
third gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be
helpful in snow or icy conditions. To select second or
third gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap
the gear selector rearward (+) once or twice.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
• The system will ignore shift commands that would
cause engine lugging or overspeed. An audible beep
will sound if an inappropriate gear is requested.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en-
gaged because the transmission will not shift auto-
matically.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector
to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on
a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision
or personal injury.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger-
ous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the front wheels. You could lose control of the
vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for
a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning, and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
• Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in
a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cau-
tions and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles
in the way before driving through the standing
water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
after driving through standing water. Do not
continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid ap-
pears contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving.
If the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced or no power
steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself
and others. Service should be obtained as soon as
possible.
If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the
vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is dis-
played on the instrument cluster screen, they indicate
that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred
which caused an over temperature condition in the
power steering system. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
moments until the icon and message turn off. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is dis-
played on the instrument cluster screen, they indicate
the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for
service. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer
for service.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly
as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever
up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the
Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave a manual
transmission in FIRST gear or REVERSE gear.
Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
Parking Brake
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
SPORT MODE
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
In Sport mode, the engine is more responsive to the
throttle pedal, and provides more maximum torque by
increasing turbo boost pressure. Steering feedback is
improved, and steering effort is slightly higher. This
driving mode is useful for spirited driving.
1. To activate the Sport mode, push the SPORT button.
Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
2. Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.
3. Press the accelerator pedal again to activate.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the
driver with slight increase in effort and changes the
transmission shift schedules for more aggressive shift-
ing. This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty
roads where more steering precision is desired in spir-
ited cornering.
SPORT Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
1. To activate the Sport mode, push the SPORT button.
Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
2. Push the SPORT button again to return to the stan-
dard driving mode.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion. However, there will be some loss of overall brak-
ing effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required
to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that
required with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction
Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work
together to enhance vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions and are commonly referred
to as ESC.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-
ditions. The system operates with a separate computer
SPORT Button
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel
lock-up and to help avoid skidding on slippery sur-
faces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turn-
ing the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if
the fault detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
ous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving
the use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop
as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping se-
quence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce
brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer de-
sired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If
wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the
slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to
provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of
the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), func-
tions similar to a limited slip differential and controls
the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a
driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system
will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode or Full Off
mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in
this section for further information.
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will
maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied
for a short period of time after the driver takes his foot
off the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the
throttle during this short period of time, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down
the hill. The system will release brake pressure in
proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the
vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of
travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 2.5% (manual transmission) or
7% grade or greater (automatic transmission) grade
hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle in NEUTRAL [manual transmission], vehicle
facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing
uphill is in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the
system will not activate and slight rolling may
occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in for
further information.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system enhances
directional control and stability of the vehicle under
various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteer-
ing or understeering of the vehicle by applying the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteering or understeering condition. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to
determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the
actual path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
NOTE: The ESC Off switch is located left of the steering
column (Manual Transmission Only).
WARNING!
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction af-
forded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
prevent all accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
(Continued)
ESC Off Switch (Automatic Transmission)
ESC Off Switch (Manual Transmission)
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also can-
not prevent collisions resulting from loss of ve-
hicle control due to inappropriate driver input for
the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
characteristics of your vehicle, and may nega-
tively affect the performance of the ESC system.
Changes to the steering system, suspension, brak-
ing system, tire type and size or wheel size may
adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also de-
grade ESC performance. Any vehicle modifica-
tion or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the
effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has three available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for
specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC
Off switch. This mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand or gravel
conditions, when more wheel spin than ESC would
normally allow is required to gain traction.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the switch
again. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of
operation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Full Off
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on public roadways. In this
mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned
OFF, except for the limited slip feature described in the
TCS section. To enter the “Full Off” mode, depress and
hold the ESC OFF switch for five seconds. After five
seconds, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate,
and the “ESC OFF” message will display in the instru-
ment cluster. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily press
the ESC OFF switch.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are cancelled.
Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
ESC is unavailable. The “Full Off” ESC mode is
intended for off-highway or offroad use only.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position for four sec-
onds. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from
this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15
LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
–
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
–
⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
–
⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
–
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
–
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index un-
der certain operating conditions
–
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating
conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure –
Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the
tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on
the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
•
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
•
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which
the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-
sure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overload-
ing can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling,
and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of
the recommended load capacity for your vehicle.
Never overload them.
(Continued)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions. Under-inflation increases tire
flexing and can result in over-heating and tire
failure. Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuck
holes can cause damage that results in tire failure.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control. Always drive with each
tire inflated to the recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressure.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if
you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold
tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Load-
ing Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Start-
ing And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supple-
ment, located in your Owner’s Information kit.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and
rear axles must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in “Starting And Operating”, or the Tire
Information Supplement located in your Owner’s Infor-
mation kit, for further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never ex-
ceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount
of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The
following table shows examples on how to calculate
total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate
for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overload-
ing can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling,
and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stabil-
ity of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will pre-
vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pres-
sure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at
high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure
is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or origi-
nal equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pres-
sures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to
the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6
mm).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size
and service description (Load Index and Speed Sym-
bol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or
if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more infor-
mation, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe
injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also
creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states
prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of
inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred
to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when
the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).
Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced
immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service
Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for
further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with a compact or limited use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the
tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recom-
mended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with
a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do
so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with
a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire descrip-
tion on the Tire and Loading Information Placard
located on the driver’s side door opening or on the
sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17
101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since
the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible
spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do
so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on
the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This
spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not
the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or
repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel.
Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures
listed on your Tire and Loading Information Plac-
ard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear
edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread
depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this
section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire fail-
ure. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected regu-
larly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures.
The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use
tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the
paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicator” in this section.
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or
the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your
tire will be found on the original equipment tire side-
wall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire
Safety Information” section of this manual for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Fail-
ure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance charac-
teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-
dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices
are not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and con-
tribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation
being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were estab-
lished by the National Highway Traffic Safety Ad-
ministration. The specific grade rating assigned by
the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on
the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and one-half times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics and
climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement, as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does
not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplan-
ing, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all passenger vehicle
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or ex-
cessive loading, either separately or in combina-
tion, can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven, this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects,
or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold tire pressure on the placard. Once
the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire
pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn
off. The system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186
kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This
tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approxi-
mately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light will still be on. In this situation, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels
can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable.
After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
mended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealership to have your sensor function
checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
TPM System With Comfort Cluster
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in
the instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure
levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Re-
ceiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
• Text Message Display
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be
activated, and the “Low inflation pressure left or right
front/rear tire” text message will display when one or
more of the four active road tire pressures are low.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. The system will automatically
update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will
extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this infor-
mation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected, an audible chime will be
activated and the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring
System” text message will display. If the ignition key is
cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system
fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer
exists. A system fault can occur with any of the follow-
ing scenarios:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
• Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact
spare wheel and tire assembly.
• The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not
monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-
tale Light and the Low inflation pressure left or right
front / rear tire message will still turn ON due to the
low tire.
• However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid and the “Service
Tire Pressure Monitoring System” message will be
displayed.
• This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid and the “Service Tire Pressure
Monitoring System” message will be displayed.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact
spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically and
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn
OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
TPM System With (TFT) Tire Pressure Display
Screen
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors
to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to
each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a low pressure text message and
a graphic showing the low tire pressure tire high-
lighted in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may
Low Tire Indicator
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this infor-
mation.
TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
sound a chime and also display a “Service Tire Pressure
Monitoring System” message in the instrument cluster
for approximately 5 seconds.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the “Service Tire
Pressure Monitoring System” message will no longer
display.
A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driv-
ing next to facilities emitting the same radio frequen-
cies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Service TPM System Message
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The TPMS will not monitor the pressure in a replace-
ment tire installed without a tire pressure sensor.
• If you install a replacement tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on
and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in
the instrument cluster will still display a low pres-
sure message and a tire highlighted in a different
color.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a “Service TPM System” mes-
sage.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime
will sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will
display a “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System”
message.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it, the TPMS will update automatically. In
addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and per-
formance when using high-quality
unleaded “regular” gasoline with a
minimum octane rating of 87. For
optimum performance and fuel
economy the use of 91 octane or higher is
recommended.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful
to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock
at high speeds can cause damage and immediate ser-
vice is required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the
appropriate octane rating for your engine) before con-
sidering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gaso-
line”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and
are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivabil-
ity problems, damage critical fuel system compo-
nents, cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator
(Continued)
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
Light” to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as
they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on com-
pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane.
Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system perfor-
mance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be
indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should
ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle per-
formance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in mini-
mizing engine and fuel system de-
posits. When available, the usage of
Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom-
mended. Visit www.toptiergas.com
for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active sol-
vents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel sys-
tem gasket and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Fed-
eral law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine
performance and damage the emissions control
system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your ve-
hicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poi-
sonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the
vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting after-
market cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. It
may cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a
fire.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
•
Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one click.
This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button to turn
the message off. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in
a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the
problem will turn the MIL off.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE Transmission in NEU-
TRAL
65 mph (105 km/h) max
speed
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow ap-
plicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with
the front wheels OFF the ground).
Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be
flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) speeds
up to 65 mph (105 km/h), for any distance, if the
manual transmission is in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission dam-
age. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..........250
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ..........250
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ........251
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage ................251
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation .251
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ........252
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .......254
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS .....................258
▫ Torque Specifications ..................259
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE ...........260
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start .............261
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ...............262
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............263
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ............264
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ..........265
▫ Automatic Transmission ................266
▫ Manual Transmission ..................266
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .............................267
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ..........267
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncom-
ing traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second
time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is
disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with
the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flash-
ers may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate
action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmis-
sion in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle
speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system
and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maxi-
mum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower
control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
250 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,
the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When
safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine
at idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than
a minute, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire.
Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures
down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located under the front driver’s seat.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on
the bottom side of the Tire
Service Kit)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 251
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant
and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose)
(6) when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed
at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after
each use. Always replace these components immedi-
ately at your original equipment vehicle dealer.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
252 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the
material from the vehicle or tire and wheel compo-
nents. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled
off and properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
Tire Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on
the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls,
rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode
Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating
such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The
Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal
punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the
tread of your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
• If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
• If the tire has any sidewall damage.
• If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
• If the wheel has any damage.
• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat sources.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service
Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 253
WARNING! (Continued)
warnings can result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It
causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush
immediately with plenty of water if there is any
contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out
of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth
immediately with plenty of water and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult
a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6)
and (7) to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire
Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the
best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant
into the deflated tire and running the air pump.
Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem
in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission)
or in Gear (manual transmission) and place the
ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to
the deflated tire.
254 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning on the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the gear selector in NEU-
TRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1)
through the Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (4) to turn on the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning on the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 255
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as
70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire imme-
diately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue
to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the
pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the
driver-side latch pillar (recommended pressure).
Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes overinflated, push the De-
flation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is
at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from
the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the
end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the
vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D)
“Drive Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant
(Continued)
256 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued)
contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s
interior. It can also result in sealant contacting
internal Tire Service Kit components which may
cause permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the
tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to
ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within
the tire. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced
after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.
Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You
Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the
tire and loading information label on the driver-side
door opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 257
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or
tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle And Hose Replace-
ment”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the
authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been
sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating
the bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in
the vehicle.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
258 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
66 Ft-Lbs (90 N·m)
Steel Wheels Only
74 Ft-Lbs (100 N·m)
Aluminum Wheels
Only
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 259
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to
be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery
in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improp-
erly so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is fro-
zen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal
injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
Torque Patterns
260 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
the engine compartment.
1 — Positive Battery (+) Post (Covered With Protective
Cap)
2 — Negative Battery Post (-)
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadver-
tent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the transmission into
gear and turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary elec-
trical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the positive (+)
battery post. To remove the cover pull upward on the
cover.
Battery Posts
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 261
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set
the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property damage
due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster ve-
hicle or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle underhood compartment)
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting elec-
trical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the spe-
cific ground point, do not use any other exposed
metal parts.
262 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
turn the key to RUN position on the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
6. Once the vehicle is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your ve-
hicle, you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at your authorized dealer.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or SEC-
OND GEAR and REVERSE (with manual transmission),
while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least
amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain
the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, or
racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 263
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙
mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the
⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage,
or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE/SECOND GEAR and REVERSE,
do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin
the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
(no transmission shifting occurring).
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the gear
selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the gear selector override access cover (lo-
cated on the right side of the gear selector housing)
by prying at the bottom edge of the cover.
264 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5.
Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the access
hole, and push and hold the override release lever in.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The
Ground
AUTOMATIC TRANS-
MISSION
MANUAL TRANSMIS-
SION
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEU-
TRAL
• 65 mph (104 km/h)
max speed
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Gear Selector Override Access Hole
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 265
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to pre-
vent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and
other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety
chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/
RUN mode.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Automatic Transmission
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery
is discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this
section for instructions on shifting the transmission out
of PARK in order to move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission dam-
age. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Manual Transmission
• Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
266 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe engine and/or trans-
mission damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information on the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 267
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . .271
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .272
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .......................272
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS .........................273
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS .................274
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ....................274
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ..........275
▫ Engine Oil .........................275
▫ Engine Oil Filter .....................277
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...............277
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ..............278
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ............279
▫ Body Lubrication ....................283
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ..............283
▫ Adding Washer Fluid .................285
▫ Exhaust System .....................285
▫ Cooling System .....................286
▫ Brake System .......................291
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped ......293
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . .294
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ..........................295
䡵 FUSES .............................301
▫ Interior Fuses .......................302
▫ Underhood Fuses ....................304
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ...................306
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS ................307
7
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT .................308
▫ Interior Bulbs .......................308
▫ Exterior Bulbs .......................308
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ...................311
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS .............................312
▫ Engine ............................312
▫ Chassis ...........................313
270 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Front Distribution Unit (Fuses)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 271
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and auto-
matic transmission control systems. When these sys-
tems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current government regu-
lations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in making
repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
The vehicle must be serviced before any emis-
sions tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emis-
sions controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the diagnosis
and service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port
in order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
(Continued)
272 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control sys-
tem. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Main-
tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, or recently had a dead battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be deter-
mined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail
the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check
if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON mode, but do not crank
or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition to the ON mode,
you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 273
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you cycle the
ignition OFF or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replace-
ment, you may need to do nothing more than drive
your vehicle as you normally would in order for your
OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test
routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle ser-
viced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station
can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the
engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled mainte-
nance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by
the use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to
genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be
covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
274 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed
your vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the
future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended mainte-
nance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in
these components as the chemicals can damage
your engine, transmission, or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is approximately five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 275
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground,
and approximately five minutes after a fully warmed
engine is shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil
level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range
markings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by
a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil
when the reading is at the low end of the indicated
range will result in the oil level at the full end of the
indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can
lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil
temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased
oil temperature could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it
is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled mainte-
nance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve
months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever
comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is
generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for
turbocharged engines under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer recommends synthetic
engine oils that are API Certified and meet the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-12991.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recommended for
all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves
low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
276 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be im-
paired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, ser-
vice station or governmental agency for advice on how
and where used oil and oil filters can be safely dis-
carded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dis-
posable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consid-
erably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine oil filters are
high quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
can provide a measure of protection in the case of
engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal
is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure
that no one is near the engine compartment before
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 277
WARNING! (Continued)
starting the vehicle with the air induction system
(air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so
can result in serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free bat-
tery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery
fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do
not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area
immediately with large amounts of water. Refer
to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow
cable clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
(Continued)
278 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting volt-
age.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a perfor-
mance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Warranty Information Book for further war-
ranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refriger-
ant or any repair requiring lines to be discon-
nected should be done by an experienced techni-
cian.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air condition-
ing system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not cov-
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 279
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air condition-
ing service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equip-
ment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf —
If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluoolefine HFO that is an ozone-saving product with a
low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle
is running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed
and the blower operating, the blower can contact
hands and may propel dirt and debris into your
eyes, resulting in personal injury.
280 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the
lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the Torx screw that secures the passenger
side console closeout cover.
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disen-
gage the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
Torx Screw Location
Console Closeout Panel
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 281
3. Remove the two 5.5 mm screws (1 and 2) that secure
the particulate air filter cover to the HVAC housing.
4. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing. Take note of the air filter position
indicators.
5. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need
to replace it more often.
6. Install the passenger side console closeout.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Air Filter Cover Screw Locations
A/C Air Filter
282 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latch-
ing components to ensure proper function. When per-
forming other underhood services, the hood latch,
release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned
and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and
a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumu-
lations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these condi-
tions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 283
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully
upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the
wiper blade holder.
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
Lifting The Pivot Cap
1—WiperArm
2 — Pivot Cap
Removing The Wiper Blade
1—WiperBlade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3—WiperArm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
284 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be
checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ anti-
freeze). Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section
for further information.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer sol-
vents are flammable. They could ignite and burn
you. Care must be exercised when filling or work-
ing around the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine ex-
haust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside
the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle
is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breath-
ing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”
for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials
might be grass or leaves coming into contact with
your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 285
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-
trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-
formance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle
serviced promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the
converter to overheat, resulting in possible dam-
age to the converter and vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifi-
cations, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan motor
lead before working near the radiator cooling fan.
(Continued)
286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may start
at any time, whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system, please
contact your local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 287
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or
any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a
non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced
into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To pre-
vent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please review these recommendations for using Or-
ganic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (anti-
freeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Stan-
dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher con-
centrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your
authorized dealer for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality
water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle
is operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system, please contact
your local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not rec-
ommended and can result in cooling system damage.
If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emer-
gency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and
refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as
soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine
coolant (antifreeze) remains pressurized.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing sur-
faces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety
precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion
by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-
based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to
remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean
up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be
between the bottom and top lines marked “COLD FILL
RANGE”.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed
to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being va-
porized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs
may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (anti-
freeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnor-
mally high brake temperatures, excessive lining
wear, and possible brake damage. Riding the
brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an
emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately
if the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring
the fluid level up to the requirements described on the
brake fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall
as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be
checked when the pads are replaced. However, low
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may
be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to
both the brake system and the clutch release system.
The two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a
leak in one system will not affect the other system. The
manual transmission clutch release system should not
require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle.
If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system
does not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be
a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system.
See your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
(Continued)
292 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
original factory installed hydraulic master cylin-
der reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden
brake failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis-
sion.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmis-
sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The
fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole
and a point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the
bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed
at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary
unless lubricant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts”
in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes
should be used in any transmission; only the approved
lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque con-
verter shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica-
tions.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid
additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission com-
ponents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately
to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the
proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed
at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for
the life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes
are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if
the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will en-
able you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch
the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the
responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-
ers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are
well packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint
to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with
the same soap solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the
wheel surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners
and automatic car washes may damage the wheel’s
protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-
mended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of
tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to
prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment,
Mopar Chrome Cleaner, or their equivalent is recom-
mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels. Do not use any products
on Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will
permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These prod-
ucts may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes
before doing so. Driving the vehicle and applying the
brakes when stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor
corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently dam-
age this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH
ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A
SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all
that is required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
residue.
298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regu-
lar cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of
dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with
any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners
to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a
leather conditioner is not required to maintain the
original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immedi-
ately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
• Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Keton based cleaning products to clean leather
seats, as damage to the seat may result.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on
the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray
cleaner directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface
which minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your
vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper
turning loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with
a wet soft cloth until all residue is removed.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a colli-
sion if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any
other material. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in serious personal injury, fire and/or prop-
erty damage.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the igni-
tion is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an au-
thorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering sys-
tem blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under
the instrument panel.
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse Num-
ber
Mini Fuse Description
1 F12 7.5 Amp Brown Right Low Beam
2 F32 5 Amp Tan Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and
Door Courtesy Lights
3 F53 5 Amp Tan Instrument Panel Node
Fuse Panel
302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse Num-
ber
Mini Fuse Description
4 F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Door Locking
5 F36 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Socket, Vehicle Radio, Climate
Control System
6 F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer
7 F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
8 F13 7.5 Amp Brown Left Low Beam, Headlamp Leveling
9 F50 7.5 Amp Brown Airbag
10 F51 5 Amp Tan Vehicle Radio Switch, Climate Control Sys-
tem, Stop Light, Clutch
11 F37 5 Amp Tan Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node
12 F49 5 Amp Tan Exterior Mirror, GPS, Electric Mirror, Park-
ing Sensor
13 F31 5 Amp Tan Ignition, Climate Control
14 F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side
of the engine compartment, next to the battery. To
access the fuses, press the release tabs and remove the
cover.
The ID number of the electrical component correspond-
ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller
F02 20 Amp Yellow – Audio Amplifier
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – Anti-Lock Brake Pump
F05 70 Amp Tan – Electric Power Steering
Front Distribution Unit
304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F06 20 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan - Single Speed
F06 30 Amp Green – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 40 Amp Orange – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F09 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
F10 – 10 Amp Red Horn
F11 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain
F11 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F14 – 5 Amp Tan High Beam (Shutter)
F15 – 15 Amp Blue Cigar Lighter
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown Transmission
F17 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F17 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain
F18 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain
F18 – 5 Amp Tan Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
F20 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Seats – If Equipped
F21 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow Anti-Lock Brake Valves
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F24 – 7.5 Amp Brown Stability Control System
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamps
F82 30 Amp Green – Sunroof/Convertible Top
F83 20 Amp Yellow – Cooling Pump – If Equipped
F84 – 10 Amp Red Transmission
F85 30 Amp Green – Rear Defroster
F87 – 5 Amp Tan Rear Defroster
F90 – 5 Amp Tan Heated Mirrors – If Equipped
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Proce-
dures” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Lamp C5W
Courtesy Lamp W5W
Rear Cargo Lamp W5W
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp HIR2LL
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21/5W
Front Fog Lamps H11LL
Front Side Marker Lamps W3W
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Side Direction Lamps WY5W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W
Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W
Rear Tail and Stop Lamps P21/5W
Rear Backup Lamps W16W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp W5W
License Plate Lamps LED (See Authorized dealer)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
Bulb Number
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Interior Bulbs
Rear Cargo Lamp
1. Using a suitable tool open the light box.
2. Pull the bulb out.
3. Replace the bulb, and reinstall the light box cover.
Exterior Bulbs
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmo-
spheric conditions change to allow the condensation to
change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will
usually accelerate the clearing process.
Headlamps Low Beam And High Beam
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the head-
lamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime
Running Lamps
1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or
right.
2. Open the wheel housing access door.
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp
housing.
4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
7. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized
dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand
access to side marker lamp.
2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the hous-
ing, and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the wheel liner.
Wheel Housing Access Door
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp
assembly.
3. Remove four screws and separate the backplate from
the lamp housing.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by push-
ing them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight
out.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
1. Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening
screws.
2. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assem-
bly.
3. Disconnect the electric connector.
4. Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder.
5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb to be replaced and
replace it.
6. Close the back cap locking it properly.
7. Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the
guard caps.
Tail Lamp Assembly Screws
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 10.5 Gallons 40 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4 Liter Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters
Cooling System
1.4 Liter Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula) — with Manual Transmission
4.6 Quarts 4.4 Liters
1.4 Liter Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula) — with Automatic Transmission
5.8 Quarts 5.5 Liters
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-90032.
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12991. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 91 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally com-
patible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar C635 DDCT/MTX
Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Use only Mopar AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the
function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703
should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Convertible Top Rails – If Equipped We recommend you use Berulub FR 43.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that
service is required for your vehicle. Operating condi-
tions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely
hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage
will influence when the “Change Oil” message is dis-
played. Severe operating conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indica-
tor message after completing the scheduled oil change.
If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone
other than your authorized dealer, the message can be
reset by referring to the steps described under “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve
months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever
comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is
generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the
vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment
or is operated predominately at idle or only very low
engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered
Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
316 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator sys-
tem turns on.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
Inspect brake pads, rotors, and park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-
road conditions.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals,
and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect brake linings, replace if needed. X X X X X X X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 317
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect parking brake function, adjust as neces-
sary.
XXX X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Clean and lube sun roof tracks. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace the spark plugs. ** X X X X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
Replace accessory drive belt and tensioner. X
Replace the timing belt. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based
only, yearly intervals do not apply.
318 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to
perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance.
This could cause an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 319
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ......................322
▫ Prepare For The Appointment............322
▫ Prepare A List .......................322
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ............322
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............322
▫ FIAT Customer Center .................323
▫ FIAT Canada Customer Center ...........323
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)..................323
▫ Service Contract .....................323
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ............324
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ...........324
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. ..............................324
▫ In Canada..........................325
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ...........325
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring
the right papers with you, as well as your warranty
folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the ser-
vice manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history, as this can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental,
it is advisable to make these arrangements when you
call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s cus-
tomer center.
322 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer
center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FIAT Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: 1-888-242-6342
FIAT Canada Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the
mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If
you have any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 323
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract.
It is not responsible for any service contract other than
the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service
contract, and you require service after the manufactur-
er’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
to the contract documents, and contact the person listed
in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with
their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or
related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
contained in vehicles and certain products of com-
ponent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA USA LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
324 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems between you, your
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect,
you should contact the Customer Service Depart-
ment immediately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian government
should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510
or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are
accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the in-
formation that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightfor-
ward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manu-
als make it easy for students and technicians to find and
fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems
and features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step trouble-
shooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic
tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 325
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. In-
cluded are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-
nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
• Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
• Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
326 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...........288
Adding Fuel............................245
Adding Washer Fluid .....................285
Additives, Fuel ..........................244
AirBag................................36
Advance Front Air Bag ...................36
Air Bag Operation ......................38
Driver Knee Air Bag .....................39
Enhanced Accident Response ..............267
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............267
FrontAirBag..........................36
If A Deployment Occurs ..................43
Knee Impact Bolsters ....................38
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ...........46
Transporting Pets .......................63
Air Bag Light ........................65, 124
Air Bag Maintenance ......................46
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . .277
Air Conditioner Maintenance ................279
Air Conditioning Filter .................182, 280
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .............181
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............279, 280
Air Conditioning System................180, 279
Air Pressure, Tires........................224
Alarm
Disarm The System .....................14
Vehicle Security Alarm ...................14
Alarm (Security Alarm) .....................14
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ..............7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)..............288, 311
Capacities ...........................311
Disposal .............................290
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...............206
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................137
Appearance Care ........................295
Audio Systems (Radio) ....................155
Automatic Dimming Mirror..................75
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .........180
Automatic Transaxle .......................11
Automatic Transmission .............192, 294, 295
Adding Fluid .........................295
Fluid And Filter Changes .................295
Fluid Change .........................295
Fluid
Level Check ......................295
Fluid Type ...........................313
Gear Ranges ..........................195
Special Additives ......................294
Autostick ..............................199
328 INDEX
Battery ............................127, 278
Charging System Light ..................127
Jump Starting .........................260
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ..............17
Belts, Seat ..............................65
Body Mechanism Lubrication................283
B-Pillar Location .........................218
Brake Assist System ......................208
Brake Fluid .........................312, 313
Brake, Parking ..........................203
Brakes ................................291
Brake System ........................206, 291
Anti-Lock (ABS) .......................206
Master Cylinder .......................292
Parking .............................203
Warning Light ........................125
Brake/Transmission Interlock................193
Bulb Replacement.....................307, 308
Bulbs, Light..........................68, 307
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .........311
Capacities, Fluid .........................311
Caps, Filler
Fuel ................................245
Oil (Engine) ..........................276
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............64, 245
Cargo Area Features ......................107
Car Washes ............................296
Cellular Phone ..........................170
Chains, Tire ............................233
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................214
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) .273
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............64
Checks, Safety ...........................64
Child Restraint ...........................47
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ..........................51
Child Restraints ........................47
Child Seat Installation ....................60
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .......58
Infants And Child Restraints ...............49
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ......
53
Older Children And Child Restraints .........50
Seating Positions .......................52
Clean Air Gasoline .......................242
Cleaning
Wheels .............................297
Climate Control .........................171
Manual .............................171
Clutch ................................292
10
INDEX 329
Clutch Fluid ............................292
Compact Spare Tire.......................228
Connector
UCI................................156
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .........156
Contract, Service.........................323
Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................311
Cooling System..........................286
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............288
Coolant Level .....................287, 290
Disposal Of Used Coolant ................290
Drain, Flush, And Refill ..................287
Inspection ...........................290
Points To Remember .................289, 291
Pressure Cap .........................289
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ........288, 312
Corrosion Protection ......................295
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...............92
Cruise Light.........................141, 142
Cupholders ............................106
Customer Assistance ......................322
Customer Programmable Features ............157
Daytime Running Lights ....................86
Dealer Service...........................274
Defroster, Windshield ......................66
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................272
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission .................295
Disarming, Security System ..................14
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............290
Door Ajar..............................129
Door Ajar Light .........................129
Door Locks .............................19
Door Locks, Automatic .....................21
Downshifting ...........................192
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water ...............................201
Electrical Power Outlets....................103
Electric Remote Mirrors.....................
76
Electronic Brake Control System ..............206
Brake Assist System ....................208
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .............209
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .......127
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher .................250
Jump Starting .........................260
330 INDEX
Towing .............................265
Emission Control System Maintenance .........273
Engine
Air Cleaner ..........................277
Break-In Recommendations ................63
Checking Oil Level .....................275
Compartment .........................271
Cooling .............................286
Exhaust Gas Caution .................64, 245
Fails To Start .........................189
Flooded, Starting ......................189
Fuel Requirements .....................242
Oil .............................275, 311
Oil Filler Cap .........................276
Oil Filter ............................277
Oil Selection ......................276, 312
Overheating ..........................250
Starting .............................188
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........267
Ethanol ...............................242
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................64, 245
Exhaust System .......................64, 285
Exterior Lights........................68, 307
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................277
Air Conditioning ...................182, 280
Engine Oil ...........................277
Engine Oil Disposal ....................277
Flashers
Turn Signal ........................68, 140
Flash-To-Pass ............................86
Flooded Engine Starting ...................189
Fluid, Brake ............................313
Fluid Capacities .........................311
Fluid Leaks .............................68
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission .................295
Fluids ................................312
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ..........312
Fog
Lights ..............................89
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ....................263
Fuel..................................242
Adding .............................245
Additives ............................244
Capacity .............................311
Clean Air ............................242
Ethanol .............................242
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ....................245
10
INDEX 331
Gasoline ............................242
Light ...............................139
Materials Added .......................244
Methanol ............................242
Octane Rating .........................242
Requirements .........................242
Specifications .........................312
Tank Capacity .........................311
Fueling ...............................245
Fuses .................................301
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............245, 246
Gasoline, Clean Air .......................242
Gasoline (Fuel) .......................242, 311
Gasoline, Reformulated ....................242
Gear Ranges ............................195
Gear Select Lever Override .................264
General Information ......................241
General Maintenance......................275
Glass Cleaning ..........................300
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ........................201
Headlights ..............................86
Cleaning ............................300
Switch ...............................86
Head Restraints ..........................82
Heated Mirrors...........................78
Heated Seats ............................81
Hill Start Assist .........................209
Holder, Cup ............................106
Hood Release............................84
Ignition ................................11
Key.................................11
Ignition Key Removal ......................11
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...................13
Instrument Cluster ....................128, 140
Instrument Cluster ..................113,121
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display ...............143
Instrument Panel And Controls...............111
Instrument Panel Cover....................300
Instr
ument Panel Lens Cleaning ..............300
Interior Appearance Care...................299
Interior Lighting..........................88
Introduction .............................4
332 INDEX
Jump Starting ...........................260
Key Fob
Disarm The Alarm ......................14
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .17
Key-In Reminder .........................13
Key, Replacement .........................14
Keys ..................................11
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................13
Lane Change Assist .......................87
Lap/Shoulder Belts........................26
Latches ................................68
Hood ...............................84
Lead Free Gasoline .......................242
Leaks, Fluid .............................68
Life Of Tires ............................231
Liftgate (Sedan) ..........................22
Light Bulbs ..........................68, 307
Lights ............................68, 85, 86
AirBag...........................65, 124
Brake Assist Warning ...................212
Brake Warning ........................125
Bulb Replacement ......................308
Cruise ...........................141, 142
Engine Temperature Warning ..............128
Exterior ..............................68
High Beam ...........................86
Low Fuel ............................139
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........134
Park .............................86, 140
Seat Belt Reminder .....................124
Service ..............................308
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...........131
Traction Control .......................212
Turn Signal .....................68, 87, 140
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . .128, 140
Loading Vehicle
Tires ...............................218
Locks
Automatic Door ........................21
Door ................................19
Power Door ...........................20
Lubrication, Body ........................283
Lug Nuts ..............................258
Maintenance Free Battery...................278
Maintenance,
General .....................275
Maintenance Procedures ...................275
Maintenance Schedule .....................316
10
INDEX 333
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . .134, 273
Manual, Service .........................325
Manual Transmission ..................190, 293
Fluid Level Check ......................293
Frequency Of Fluid Change ...............294
Lubricant Selection ..................293, 313
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ...................292
Methanol ..............................242
Mirrors ................................75
Automatic Dimming .....................75
Electric Powered .......................76
Heated ..............................78
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ..............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............235
MTBE/ETBE ...........................242
Multi-Function Control Lever ................86
New Vehicle Break-In Period .................63
Occupant Restraints .......................23
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ...............242
Oil, Engine .........................275, 311
Capacity .............................311
Change Interval .......................276
Checking ............................275
Disposal .............................277
Filter ...............................277
Filter Disposal ........................277
Pressure Warning Light ..................128
Recommendation ...................276, 311
Viscosity ............................276
Oil Filter, Change ........................277
Oil Filter, Selection .......................277
Oil Pressure Light ........................128
Onboard Diagnostic System .................272
Operating Precautions .....................272
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Overheating, Engine ......................250
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .........4,325
Paint Care .............................295
Parking Brake...........................203
Pets...................................
63
Placard, Tire And Loading Information......218, 219
Power
Door Locks ...........................20
Mirrors ..............................76
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........103
Steering .............................202
Sunroof .............................101
334 INDEX
Windows .............................21
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ..............31
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .............................32
Radial Ply Tires .........................225
Radio Frequency
General Information .....................19
Radio Operation .........................170
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) ......................22
Rear Window Features ....................108
Recreational Towing ......................247
Reformulated Gasoline ....................242
Refrigerant .............................280
Release, Hood ...........................84
Reminder, Seat Belt........................25
Remote Keyless Entry
Disarm The Alarm ......................14
Power Convertible Top Function ............16
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........170
Replacement Bulbs .......................307
Replacement Keys ........................14
Replacement Parts........................274
Replacement Tires ........................232
Reporting Safety Defects ...................324
Restraint, Head ..........................82
Restraints, Child..........................47
Rotation, Tires ..........................233
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................65
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................67
Safety Defects, Reporting ...................324
Safety, Exhaust Gas........................64
Safety Information, Tire ....................213
Safety Tips ..............................64
Schedule, Maintenance ....................316
Seat Belt
Energy Management Feature ...............32
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ..............28
Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................26
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ..............30
Pregnant Women .......................31
Seat Belt Extender ......................31
Seat Belt Pretensioner ....................32
Seat Belt Reminder ......................25
Seat Belt Maintenance .....................301
Seat Belt Reminder ........................25
Seat
Belts ............................25, 65
Child Restraint .........................47
Extender .............................31
10
INDEX 335
Front Seat .......................25, 26, 28
Inspection ............................65
Operating Instructions ...................28
Pregnant Women .......................31
Pretensioners ..........................32
Rear Seat .............................26
Reminder ............................124
Untwisting Procedure ....................30
Seats ..................................78
Adjustment ...........................78
Heated ..............................81
Security Alarm
Disarm The System .....................14
Security Alarm .........................14
Selection Of Oil .........................276
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................13
Service Assistance ........................322
Service Contract .........................323
Service Manuals .........................325
Shift Lever Override ......................264
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission ............191
Shoulder Belts ...........................26
Signals, Turn ......................68, 87, 140
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)..................233
Snow Tires .............................227
Spare Tire....................227, 228, 229, 230
Spark Plugs ............................312
Specifications
Oil ................................276
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ...........................95
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...............92
Sport Mode ............................205
Starting ...............................188
Automatic Transmission .................188
Cold Weather .........................188
Engine Fails To Start ....................189
Manual Transmission ...................188
Steering
Power ..............................202
Tilt Column ...........................92
Wheel, Tilt ............................92
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..............170
Steering
Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . .170
Storage ...............................306
Storage, Vehicle .........................181
Stuck, Freeing...........................263
Sun Roof ..............................101
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag ........36
336 INDEX
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .........180
Tilt Steering Column.......................92
Tire And Loading Information Placard ......218, 219
Tire Markings ...........................213
Tires.....................67, 223, 227, 228, 234
Aging (Life Of Tires) ....................231
Air Pressure .......................218, 223
Chains ..............................233
Compact Spare ........................228
General Information ..............223, 227, 228
High Speed ..........................225
Inflation Pressures .....................224
Life Of Tires ..........................231
Load Capacity .....................218, 220
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........235
Pressure Warning Light ..................131
Quality Grading .......................234
Radial ..............................225
Replacement ..........................232
Rotation .............................233
Safety ...........................213, 223
Sizes ...............................214
Snow Tires ...........................227
Spare Tire ..................227, 228, 229, 230
Spinning ............................230
Tread Wear Indicators ...................230
Tire Safety Information ....................213
Tire Service Kit .........251, 252, 254, 255, 257, 258
To Open Hood ...........................84
Towing ...............................246
Disabled Vehicle .......................265
Recreational ..........................247
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ..........247
Traction ...............................200
Traction Control .........................208
T
railer Towing ..........................246
Transaxle
Automatic ............................11
Transmission ...........................294
Automatic ........................192, 294
Fluid ...............................294
Manual .............................190
Transporting Pets .........................63
Tread Wear Indicators .....................230
Turn Signals .........................87, 140
UCI Connector ..........................156
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................234
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . .156
Unleaded Gasoline .......................242
10
INDEX 337
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...............30
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading .........................220
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............7
Vehicle Security Alarm Disarming .............14
Vehicle Storage.......................181, 306
Warnings And Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information ...................4,324
Washer
Adding Fluid .........................285
Washers, Windshield ....................89, 91
Washing Vehicle .........................296
Water
Driving Through .......................201
Wheel And Wheel Trim ....................297
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ................297
Wind Buffeting .......................22, 102
Window Fogging ........................182
Windows ...............................21
Power ...............................21
Windshield Defroster ......................66
Windshield Washers ....................89, 91
Windshield Wiper Blades...................283
Windshield Wipers ........................89
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................283
338 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2017
2017 FIAT
®
500 ABARTH
FIAT
®
500 ABARTH
AND ABARTH CABRIO
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
17FX24-126-AD
